JP7066787B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-101428

In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the staging effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced effect.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of variable display of the specific identification information so that the player can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.
Game control means and
Production control means and
Display means and
Equipped with sound output means,
The game control means is
When the game medium enters the starting area, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed, and the specific identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the determination, any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state and a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine the fluctuation pattern of
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, the first command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, the second command is transmitted to the staging control means.
The staging control means
The variable display of the decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed by using the display means.
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the special reach is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the special reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the special reach is executed when the first command is received, the display means displays the title display corresponding to the special reach, suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, and a plurality of. A specific control is executed to display a first expectation suggestion element composed of, and a second expectation suggestion element composed of a plurality of frames corresponding to the first expectation suggestion element. ,
When the special reach is executed when the second command is received, the display means is made to display the title display corresponding to the special reach, and the specific control is executed.
The specific control is
After displaying the second expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality, the display of the first expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality is started one by one, and the first expectation composed of the plurality is started. It is a control that displays the degree suggestion elements one by one in the corresponding second expectation suggestion element and highlights the first expectation suggestion element displayed in the second expectation suggestion element.
Among the second expectation suggestion elements composed of the plurality of pieces, the control does not highlight the second expectation suggestion element in which the first expectation suggestion element is not displayed in the frame.
The first expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality is larger than the size of the second expectation suggestion element of 1 among the already displayed second expectation suggestion elements composed of the plurality. After being displayed in, it is reduced to the size of the first second expectation suggestion element and displayed in the corresponding second expectation suggestion element.
Further, (1) the gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the staging effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect.
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a preview effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible and
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B), and
Further, a specific display executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).
According to such a configuration, the staging effect is improved.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of reaching title production shown in FIG. 19 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different embodiments (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like concerning other feature parts. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the staging control command which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value which becomes the random number for game which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the game control data holding area which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the storage area which stores the number of prize balls which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the control example of the display in the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification which concerns on other characteristic parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for a game machine in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on the other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the staging control main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the priority of the staging control which concerns on other characteristic parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing in the modification example which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the progress setting confirmation processing in the modification which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the notification which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the display example which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the staging control main process which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the in-progress output change processing which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on in the modification which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the display example of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the staging control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the staging control main process which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing during setting change which concerns on a feature part 75AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on a feature part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process which concerns on a feature part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect start processing which concerns on a feature part 100AK, and the type of a timer which concerns on a feature part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of the setting suggestion effect, the type of the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern which concerns on a feature part 100AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect execution processing which concerns on a feature part 100AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on a feature part 100AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "missing". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title is notified by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled, and the staging effect is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of staging operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following staging operation is executed by the staging control CPU 120 executing the staging control process process based on the staging control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introduction part until the notification is made, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (Fig. 9). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, and in the case of a reach with a low jackpot reliability, the super is announced. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach production.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case because the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A definite decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the deciding effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display, but the reach effect is in progress. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character resident during the variable display, and the display related to the mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the staging operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars of. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expected degree suggestion effect becomes various and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation degree. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state and improves the expectation, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's line (for example, the display color of the line) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the dialogue in the reach production is provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible staging modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible staging modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (the ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). FIGS. 10 (B) to 10 (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be performed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, operation effect image to be displayed, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of configuration for other feature parts)
Next, other feature parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature unit makes it possible to control an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration or setting for making the set value changeable based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is equipped with a configuration that allows the set values to be confirmed by display. Then, the set value can be displayed by the configuration that can display the information on the game value such as the prize ball given when the game medium such as the game ball enters the predetermined area.

FIG. 20-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to this feature portion. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations common to the above-described embodiments. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. When the display result is "missing" (hiragana), it is the same as when the display result is "missing" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of a plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable accessory (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. .. The operating motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor. The staging control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the second large winning opening provided separately from the first large winning opening, which is the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is It becomes an open state in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the second large winning opening is opened during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened multiple times in the small hit game state. When the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big prize opening door is on, the 2nd big winning opening is opened by the 2nd big winning opening door, and the game ball passes (enters) the 2nd big winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big prize opening door is off, the 2nd big winning opening is closed by the 2nd big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the 2nd big winning opening ( Entry) is disabled. In this way, the second major winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second major winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second major winning opening. You may.

The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first prize-winning opening. The game ball that passes (enters) the second prize-winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second prize-winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball passes (enters) the second major winning opening that has been opened in this way, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. ) More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the 2nd prize opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the 2nd prize opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

Inside the second prize opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second major winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the 4th count switch by passing through the 4th count switch.

In this embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning door is open during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since fraud that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player becomes possible, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

Inside the second prize opening, a regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The regulating member is provided so as to be able to change between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and a permissible state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been done.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the second big winning opening door has a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example). For example, the second major winning opening is opened during the period until 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second major winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state. The first prize opening may be controlled to the first state without limitation.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second major winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the second major winning opening). good.

FIG. 20-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the staging control board 12, the power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 30.

The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second major winning openings. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and it also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11 and on the right side of the display monitor 29. The display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (1st big winning opening, 2nd big winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio of consecutive ratios and the ratio of roles after installation in the amusement park. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the staging control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 202 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is set on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the changed state is provided. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff who has the key to operate the lock switch 51 can operate the lock switch 51 among the staff in the game hall. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

When the power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on / off switching operation in the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. May be The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least, the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park or the like as the power is turned on using the power switch AK002. It is configured in.

At the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a nozzle (exhaust port) for ejecting the game ball that has won a prize in each winning opening or the gaming ball that has entered the out opening is provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

FIG. 20-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the staging control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is a determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit", or when the variable display result is "big hit". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (decision result of the jackpot type) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used.

The variation display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the setting value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". Then, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to "3". Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start in each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times is executed, for example, every 10 fluctuation starts in the special figure game. In place of these, or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command for designating the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the confirmation of the set value when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) is determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying the effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a command for specifying that the large winning opening is open during the period in which the large winning opening is open in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command designated after opening the large winning opening that specifies the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , Is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch is turned on by passing the game ball through the third count switch, that is, that the V winning is won. On the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may control to execute the V prize notification effect to notify that the V prize has been won, based on the reception of the V prize notification designation command. In the V winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined or the determination ratios of the plurality of effect patterns may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the set value may be suggested depending on the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, the effect mode of the V prize notification effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and a production mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed. May be. Alternatively, a plurality of staging modes in which the display colors of the staging images indicating "V" are different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value which is a random number for a game counted on the side of the main board 11. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value MR1 to MR5 is in the range. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

The ROM 101 has, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1), a display result determination table (setting value 2), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), and a jackpot type determination. A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is.

FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

FIG. 20-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the set value is ". It is set because a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of "2" and "3", and a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. ) To win a small hit.

FIG. 20-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the set value is "1". By winning and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a lower probability (1/99) of small hits than when the set value is "1". You are supposed to win. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 20-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, it will be a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Wins, but does not win small hits (win probability: 0). When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are "1" and "2".

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit A to) with respect to the special symbol. Decide to make a big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, 1 is set in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to other settings.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probabilities of the small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second are all the same, but the small hits are in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be low. On the other hand, when the variable special map designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is lowered in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as the case where the variable special map designation buffer is the second. In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses a display result determination table to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided to determine whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made. Judgment is made using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer, and the judgment of the small hit is performed. A separate table may be used for the case where the variable special map designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

In this embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, the judgment values other than the judgment values corresponding to the big hit are used as the judgment values corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won. You may do it. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to is 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player, and the larger the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player. May be good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, 1 has the lowest payout rate, and the larger the value in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the payout rate, and 6 is. It may be the one with the highest ball output rate. In this way, the larger the value, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Referenced to determine. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. It has become. Further, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. .. These jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is the first during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. 3 It is a big hit type determined by whether or not it has passed the count switch.

FIG. 20-7 (A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 20-7 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 20-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type regardless of whether the game ball is a reserved memory based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

FIG. 20-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E in which the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are considered to be the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpot A and jackpot D are considered to be the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is regarded as a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the first jackpot is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit A. The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 20 times. The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times, or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times. The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the second big prize opening is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot D. The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) that change the second jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times, or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

In the jackpot D and the jackpot E, the jackpot to be opened is the second jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E are the jackpots to be opened. , May be the first prize opening. That is, for the small hit game, the second big winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game, the first big winning opening is replaced with the second big winning opening. All you have to do is open the big prize opening.

In the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time-saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur due to the V winning of the game ball during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is normal. It tends to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous chan state.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball is the first. The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. , The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 100 special figure games) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of big hits A to E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hits may be provided, and 4 The following types may be provided.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 49 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 50 Up to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and up to 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to be.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 29 of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot A, and 30 Up to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the jackpots B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when the above occurs, and the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot C is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the proportion of determining jackpot A is the highest. The lowest (Big hit type determination ratio in setting value 1: Big hit C> Big hit B> Big hit A). When the set value is 2, the rate of determining the jackpot type to jackpot B is the highest, then the percentage of determining the jackpot A is high, and the percentage of determining the jackpot C is the lowest (set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot A is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the percentage of determining jackpot C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 3: Big hit A> Big hit B> Big hit C).

Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined jackpot types among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the decision rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is "1", 0 to 99 of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is "2", in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. In this way, when a V-winning jackpot occurs during a small hit game, the ratio of determining the jackpot E, in which the number of special figure games in which the time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game ends is 100, is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D, and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, the small hit A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on the above, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to the jackpot D and the proportion determined to the jackpot E are equal (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize in the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot E is determined (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the type of the small hit game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hit game state controlled when the V prize occurs may change. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at different ratios according to the variable special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B, depending on the variable special map. In other words, in order to determine the small hit type at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, one of the small hit types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type should be determined. It also includes making a 100% decision. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The determination ratio of the big hit type and the small hit type is not limited to different depending on the set value, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

Regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the playability itself is not limited to the one that does not change, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is a game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the later gaming state to the probabilistic state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a different game property (so-called V probabilistic type) in which the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map. When the set value set to 3 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the pachinko ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control). Based on this, the game may be controlled to a big hit gaming state (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type). Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the third count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probabilistic state or a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch). You may use it.

The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the predetermined determination result. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, it is determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the fluctuation display result is "small hit". A variation pattern determination table for big hits used at the time of occurrence and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "out of place" are prepared in advance.

FIG. 20-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hits and a variation pattern determination table for small hits. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is the jackpot symbol. The variation pattern determination table for small hits is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small hit symbol.

FIG. 20-9 (A) shows a variation pattern determination table for jackpot A (for jackpot A). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot is from 0 to 300 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

FIG. 20-9 (B) shows a variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is from 0 to 100 in the range of judgment values of MR3 0 to 997 (for jackpot B and jackpot C). It is assigned to PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Is assigned to. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) include the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1) and the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-). 2) For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is higher than the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Moreover, the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the jackpot type is “big hit A”. By assigning a judgment value so that the judgment value is easily assigned, the player's expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be "big hit B" or "big hit C" is raised. Can be.

FIG. 20-9 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the small hit variation pattern judgment table, regardless of whether the set value is "1", "2", or "3", 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range 0 to 997 is a small hit. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for small hit determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Has been done. Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

FIG. 20-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be an out-of-bounds symbol.

FIG. 20-10 (A) shows the deviation pattern determination table A for loss. The deviation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control. In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and super A predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

FIG. 20-10 (B) shows the deviation pattern determination table B for loss. The deviation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are used. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the deviation of the super reach β. There is.

FIG. 20-10 (C) shows the deviation pattern determination table C for loss. The deviation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the deviation of the super reach β. There is.

FIG. 20-10 (D) shows the deviation pattern determination table D. The deviation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed. In the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control are used. -2) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, and 3 are lower in this order. It is supposed to be. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the deviation patterns of the super reach α, and 901 to 997 are the deviations of the super reach β, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" is one in which the decision rate is completely the same with different set values (for example, the present embodiment) and one in which the decision rate is the same with different set values (for example, the set value). The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between 1 and 3). If the variation display result is out of order, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the variation display result is out of order, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of any one of non-reach and normal reach may be the same. It may be the same. If the variation display result is out of order, the setting value in which both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α out of line and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the out of super reach β are set regardless of the set value is set. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and if the variation display result is out of order, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern out of super reach α and the determination rate of the variation pattern out of super reach β is available. The determination ratio of may be the same regardless of the set value. If the variation display result is out of order, the setting value in which both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α out of line and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the out of super reach β are set regardless of the set value is set. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a jackpot, the setting value in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set regardless of the set value. It may be the same regardless of. When the variation display result is out of order, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value, and it is not limited to the set value. Of the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns. If the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific fluctuation pattern should be determined at 100%. It is also included to decide in. It is not limited to the form in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol). When executing, the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol). May be determined.

In each deviation pattern determination table, regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is used. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern out of super reach is not limited to a different form according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value are not limited. In consideration of the probability of loss, the variation display may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the variation pattern of the super reach loss.

FIG. 20-11 shows a game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and is an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes a game control counter setting unit 154, a game control buffer setting unit 155, and a game control counter setting unit 154.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the hold data related to the variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The first starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held without being started yet, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is a hold information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the hold data related to the variable display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The second starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is a hold information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and the random count values are executed according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The totalization of game balls and the display of the bonus ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 29 is the first large winning opening and the total number of winning balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second major winning opening (attacker), and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) out of the total number of prize balls. The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first and second prizes (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is to be displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls described below) by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( It is the ratio occupied by the following number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker) and the winning of the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu). The number of prize balls and the prize balls by winning the prizes (1st start winning opening, general winning opening) other than the 1st big winning opening, the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) and the 2nd starting winning opening (Denchu). It is the sum of numbers and. The 1st big winning opening, the 2nd big winning opening (attacker), and the 2nd starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the passable width of the game ball fluctuates to win the game ball. It is a character whose expected ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first major winning opening, the second major winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed characters and are games. The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed value.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the winning of the game, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric role prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (electric chew), first large winning opening and second big winning The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning a prize in the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 29 is a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls. The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls by winning, the number of prize balls by winning the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the ratio (%) of 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy Can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information about winning a game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is a general prize ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, an ordinary electric role prize ball, and a special electric role prize. The ball, the prize ball total, and the driving total are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the first and second major winning openings (attackers). The calculation method of the bonus ratio (composition ratio (%)) when the number of bonus balls acquired, which is the total number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of gaming media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the bonus ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method, which is a simplification of the second calculation method, will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is close to the original value.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1987/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. Since it is necessary to avoid the calculation with a decimal point when performing the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1987/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, since the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting light of a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total number of prize balls buffer, or the like, which includes a ring buffer and totals information on winning a game stored in a ring buffer including 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes. .. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is used. Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed.

In addition, when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone, such as when there is a problem in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the non-volatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clearing switch may be arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 that cannot be easily operated by a staff member of the game hall or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat radiation hole. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between a staff member or the like of a game hall who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

The display monitor 29 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched and displayed every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). do. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits. It should be noted that the attacker is not limited to the form in which the sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The number of winning balls and the number of continuous winning balls are used based on the detection result using the sensor provided after the discharge passages from which the winning game medium and the winning game medium are discharged are merged. May be aggregated.

The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the staging control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 in the main board 11 has a gate passing number counter, a first start winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form of totaling by the large winning number counter, and the number of winnings to these 1st big winning opening is totaled. A counter for the number of first prizes and a counter for the number of prizes for the second prize, which totals the number of prizes for the second prize, are separately provided, and the number of prizes for the first prize and the number of prizes for the second prize are entered. The number of winnings may be totaled individually, and the number of each of these winnings may be totaled to obtain the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

FIG. 20-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts against the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. As described above, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. .. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fifth display units 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the 4th display unit 29D of the 4th digit and the 5th display unit 29E of the 5th digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the reciprocal ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C display "y6.". "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

The main board 11 has a first major winning opening, a second major winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. The number of game balls that have entered the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a first count switch 23, a second count switch 24A, and a first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general. Switch processing is performed to confirm the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A , 2nd general winning opening switch 26B, 3rd general winning opening switch 26C, 4th general winning opening switch 26D, when a detection signal is output, 1st general winning number counter, 2nd general winning number counter, 1st 3 The values of the general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter each entry area. The number of game balls entering (the number of game balls winning into each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to aggregate the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate aggregation program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the execution program. It has become.

FIG. 20-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each winning opening to be classified is the general winning opening prize ball (the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode) winning ball), the first starting winning opening winning ball (the first). 1 With the number of prize balls of the starting prize (prize ball by winning the starting prize), the ordinary electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the attacker) be. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls that have been driven. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting are totaled. The number of game ball winnings to the winning openings may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls for the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls for the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas consisting of a counter having a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). A base storage area is provided. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls for each of the 10 sets and the total cumulative total of winning openings, and the 10 sets are equivalent. And, it is stored in the ratio combination storage area that stores the total total combination ratio and connection ratio. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio as an integer, a counter with a maximum of 1 byte can store the combination ratio and the connection ratio with a margin. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter of up to 1 byte.

FIG. 20-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 in the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is assigned to the built-in ROM area which is the ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH is the program management area) among 0000H to 2FFFH, and the CPU 103 is assigned to the built-in ROM area. Data is read from ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) in the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this built-in register area. Write the data of. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the built-in RAM area which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102. Data is written to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

FIG. 20-15 shows an RWM area that is an internal RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be used (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

The data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). ), And 10 sets of continuous ratio storage areas are provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data having different start addresses of the subroutines. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores 1 byte. When the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. ..

FIG. 20-16 shows an example of display control in the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

FIG. 20-16 (A) is a time chart showing an mode of display change in the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

FIG. 20-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

The display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. There is. For example, the operation of the display changeover switch 30 when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1". As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". By operating the display changeover switch 30 when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2". The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". By operating the display changeover switch 30 when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3". The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

In the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in each set value are not limited to the displayable form, and only one numerical value among these comparisons, combination ratios, and bases, or Only the numerical value of any 2 may be displayed. It is not limited to the form in which the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated and the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of prize balls given may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning ratio and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green, and are not limited to short-term consecutive ratios. The short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio and total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are the same as the short-term combination ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and total cumulative role ratio. It may be displayed in color.

FIG. 20-17 shows an example of executing an update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage of the total sum and total total storage area for 10 sets and the ratio and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and connection ratio of 10 sets and total total are updated, respectively. At this time, the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer are moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st to 9th storage areas of the ring buffer are each second. Move to the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", and "45", respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "120", respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily erased and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(Explanation of game control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. It suffices if this main process can be executed in place of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step Sa3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc.) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 is in an accessible state. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is set. This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is ON based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents at the time of a power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the set value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001, or after the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 182.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal The symbol display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is performed. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 is completed, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state associated therewith are terminated, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Will be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed, and the data other than the set value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. When the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10, so that the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001. , The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the set value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, or after the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as the change permission state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, the command 9100H, which is a setting change start command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 is completed, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Will be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, it is set if the lock switch 51 is on when the power failure inspection process is not executed or when the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The mode is not limited to executing the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

After that, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the value is used as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initially set by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). In addition, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update process (step Sa18), the initial value random number update process (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When the special symbol normal process is executed in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 is based on a display result determination table according to a set value and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result. Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, any of a plurality of types of variation patterns are used by using the variation pattern determination table according to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination. You just have to decide. In this way, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result at different ratios according to the set value.

In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. The set value can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. .. That is, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the RAM 102 When the stored contents are initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to You may proceed to Sa11. For example, when a RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents of the RAM 102, the staging control board 12 starts the initialization notification when the RAM clear notification command is received. There are times. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is made when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

FIG. 20-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the game hall when the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B). After that, when a staff member of the amusement park or the like presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 to ON, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. And display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It suffices if the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the game hall or the like can recognize that a new set value has been stored.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the setting change process is terminated. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. The setting change process is not limited to displaying the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29. For example, the setting value most advantageous for the player. A predetermined setting value such as "1" or "3", which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the form of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, the display may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed in the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays “1”. If "" is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the game hall when the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B). After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001 by a staff member of the game hall. As shown in 20-20 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the setting confirmation process is terminated. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In this way, the display monitor 29 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the gaming value that enables confirmation of adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information on set values for advancing the game so that the advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information on the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. can.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, and the like. The display monitor 29 is used to display the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc., while the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value. May be good. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit, for example. It is possible to distribute and simplify the processing by the control program and reduce the control load. In this way, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a board different from the board on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 may be arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on a board common to the board.

(Explanation of modified examples related to the configuration and game control in other feature parts)
FIG. 20-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modified example in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a staff member of the game hall, and the clear switch AK001 is performed together with the switching operation to turn on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation of turning on is performed, those operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 displays the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A every time the operation is detected. Numerical values are updated and displayed sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is used as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. It may be possible to change the power at the time of turning on the power, at least based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of the operation of recovering the stored contents at the time of a power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 on. In this way, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of turning on the power Control may be performed to change the set value.

When a new setting value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure holding storage, the normal drawing holding storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, and the game control counter are stored. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit is newly generated due to the change of the set value, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is newly generated. Can be prevented from being opened (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from gaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the hold storage from being deleted even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the setting value originally set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form of clearing the hold memory based on the setting of a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1. In some cases, the reserved memory may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first major winning opening and the second major winning opening are closed based on the new set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 is used for the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first prize opening and the second prize opening may be closed at the timing when the set setting value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the display monitor 29 is not provided with the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base displayed by the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The setting value is not limited to the form of being displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base setting value being displayed. In FIG. 20-22 (A), the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed by the display unit.

FIG. 20-22 (B) shows an example of display control of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2 are green, and the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base with different display colors according to the set value, it is possible to easily grasp which set value the numerical value is. In this display control example as well, as in the above embodiment, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the set value 1 is set for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. The switching display of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at 5-second intervals is changed to the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base switching display at 5-second intervals at the setting value 2, and further, the connection ratio and combination ratio at the setting value 3 are displayed. , It suffices if it can be cyclically changed to the switching display of the base at 5-second intervals. Alternatively, the switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the combination value 3 The switching display of the combination ratio at 5-second intervals, the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the switching display at the base at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals are cyclically displayed for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. Changes may be possible.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value can be displayed, and the connection ratio and the combination according to the setting value of any one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases are calculated. Only the values and the like need to be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases, the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time value are set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

The display monitor 29 has two or more of the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 1, the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the set value, and in addition to or in place of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each setting value, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in these two or more setting values can be calculated. It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set values of two or more on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for the two or more set values and can be displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at the two or more set values is not limited. , The combination ratio, and the average value of the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

The display monitor 29 may be able to display only the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set value. Further, in the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value are displayed as the initial display, and the initial display is changed to another set value according to the operation of the display changeover switch 30. You may switch to the display of the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), as predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table in the normal time, the variation display with a specific variation pattern than in the normal time ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4)) may be facilitated to be executed. If it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is completed and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and 16 after the jackpot game ends. From the second time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 10th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. The fluctuation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th time after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time. If the set value is 3, the jackpot game is determined. If the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the 5th variation display after the end, and after the 6th variation after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern can be determined using the normal variation pattern determination table. good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special fluctuation pattern is used in the first 10 fluctuations. When the variable display is executed, it is suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko gaming machine is executed. When the variation display is executed with a special variation pattern at the 30th variation after the setting value set to 1 is changed, a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set. It may be a game feature that pays attention to whether or not the variation display is executed with a special variation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of variation displays, such as confirming that the game is present. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game property, when the set setting value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the set value is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern is the highest in the first 10 fluctuations, and when the set setting value is 3, the RAM 102 is initialized ( Clear) is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the fluctuation is executed in the special fluctuation pattern at the first 10 fluctuations is the lowest. And only when the set value is 1, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the first time. The fluctuation may be executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation.

The switching condition (number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern judgment table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern judgment table to the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table differs depending on the set value. It may be determined by a ratio. The determination rate of a specific variation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases due to different switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value. Since the player can be focused on the timing, the effect of the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) uses each fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time. It may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the fluctuation pattern. In this case, even if the execution of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is decided at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. good. As a result, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can pay attention to the number of fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the effect of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is achieved. Can be enhanced. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed. A variation pattern that can be determined only until is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the player by executing the variation display according to the variation pattern according to these set values. It may be possible to notify.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variation display of 100 times) is executed, the determination rate of the variation pattern other than the super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be possible, or a fluctuation pattern different from the normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the fluctuation time is extremely short such as 0.1). The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation pattern having an extremely long fluctuation time such as 10 minutes may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific period until the variation display (100 times) is executed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It suffices to make it most difficult to execute the high setting value suggestion effect. In a specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probable change state after the jackpot game ends, and the game after the jackpot game ends based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the third count switch during the jackpot game. The state may be controllable to a probabilistic state. In this case, as the big hit type, the big hit type that opens the second big winning opening during the big hit game, that is, the big hit type that the game ball can pass through the third count switch during the big hit game (hereinafter, big hit X). The second big prize opening is not opened during the big hit game, that is, the big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) in which the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch during the big hit game is provided, and the determination ratio of these big hit X and the big hit Y is provided. May be different depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the ratio of the game state controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game different according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition to or instead of the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit and the decision rate of the big hit type, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, and the big hit in each round during the big hit game The maximum number of winnings of the game ball to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. As a result, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it may be possible to execute a movable body effect in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of the advance / retreat operation of the regulating member inside the second major winning opening, and at the same time, confirmation of the operation of the movable body and the movable body at the initial position. When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1). When a new set value is set in 1), the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. As a result, the new set value can be accurately reflected in the movement of the regulating member or the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after the execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. If the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing prior to the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be terminated before the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

The determination rate of the super reach fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is used as the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

20-23 and 20-24 show a modification in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless the staff of the game hall or the like opens the game machine frame 3. be. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent an unauthorized change of the set value of the gaming machine 1.

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A is close to the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated. Can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change the illegal setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent it. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or a security cover 500A instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 20-25 shows a modified example in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is held on the back of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52. It suffices to make it immovable from the state of being covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 20-26 shows a modified example in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported with respect to a pivot axis facing in the vertical direction provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. It suffices to make it immovable from the state where the changeover switch 52 is covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot axis (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the sealing seal. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different playability such as a probabilistic loop type and a V probabilistic type. In the case of the probabilistic loop type or V probabilistic type, a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase the number of balls held by a small hit that targets the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big hit game is provided. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the big hit probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability in the probable change state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is set to 1/30). , Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of becoming a big hit during probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Is also high, so it is easy to finish the small hit time. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of executing probabilistic change control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the setting value for which the large hit probability in the normal state is set, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller the probability. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the lower the set value for which the jackpot probability in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is for the small hit time to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probabilistic loop type and the V probabilistic type, not only the range of the game can be expanded by installing the small hit time function, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can be motivated to play a game.

In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control decision large winning opening in the probability variation control determination round is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the probability variation control determination large winning opening). ) And the short-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By deciding at different ratios, the actual probability of probable change inrush (ratio of probable change jackpot) may be different.

A gate for determining the jackpot type is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the gate for determining the jackpot type after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be extracted at the timing of the succession, and the jackpot game according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2 value may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot type is determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as the jackpot type). If the setting value is 1, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the highest, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in this way, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is used for the ball striking operation handle or the ball striking launcher. By providing it in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a may not be operated unless it is opened.

It is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, at least in a different ratio according to the set value, and the jackpot type and The fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Fluctuates at a different rate according to the set value While deciding whether to set the display result as "big hit" or "small hit", the big hit type is common regardless of the set value. And when the fluctuation pattern is determined, even if the set value is changed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is not changed, so that the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest it. When not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is also changed when the set value is changed. The setting value can be suggested, or it becomes easy to suggest.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process when the power supply is started by turning on the power, so that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 operate. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, setting confirmation state, initialization state, and power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 20-27 shows an example of state control according to the switch detection at the time of turning on the power. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in the step AKS002 of the main process to set. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is achieved. To control. In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by the main processing steps Sa41 and Sa42. By doing so, the power failure recovery state is controlled. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park. , The state can be controlled according to the detection result.

(Explanation of means related to the above feature section)
The above embodiment includes the following feature parts. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 is provided with a dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set setting value, thereby preventing the cost of the gaming machine from increasing. There was a problem that it could not be done. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to a feature unit for solving this problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process of Sa13).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A game that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first major winning opening, a second major winning opening, etc.). Value-adding means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process while the jackpot is open),
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29 or the like) capable of displaying information related to the game value given by the game value giving means, and
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this means 1, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set setting value, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can be done.

As a gaming machine of means 2 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of means 3 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2). (Parts that are displayed sequentially at 5 second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 4 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1 displays the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in red, and the set value 2 shows the continuous ratio. The role ratio and base are displayed in green, and at the setting value 3, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and the part where the base is displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and the means 4 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 30)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part that switches the display to the display of the setting value 2 ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the display of the setting value 2 connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are changed to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base display of the setting value 3. Switching part etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 4 is described, and the means 5 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 6 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion capable of displaying only the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Such)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 5 is described, and the means 6 facilitates the confirmation work of the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means. be able to.

As a gaming machine of means 7 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part to calculate the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc.). The total input is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, so that it can be calculated individually for each set value, etc.),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, the continuous ratio according to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). Role ratio, part that can display only the base, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and the means 7 can easily confirm the information.

As a gaming machine of means 8 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part to calculate the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information, which is the information corresponding to each set value, and can also calculate compound information, which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The total ratio, combination ratio, base calculation part, etc. of 2 or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base in two or more set values and makes them displayable on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7 is described, and according to the means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of staging control for other feature parts)
FIG. 20-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control main process executed by the staging control CPU 120 in the embodiment provided with the above-mentioned feature unit. It suffices that this staging control main process can be executed in place of the staging control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the power-on command process (step). Execute AKS012). After executing the command processing at power-on, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as the command process at power-on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a receive command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9200H which is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9100H that is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and waited until the reception command is acquired. If the reception command cannot be acquired and a predetermined error determination time has elapsed, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

If it is determined in step AKS023 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS025). In the process at the start of the game stop state, the progress of the staging control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it may be regulated so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025, control is performed to start the setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is completed. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen in the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification voice by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11 which has been invalidated. As a result, the restrictions may be lifted so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is initialized to the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses, based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected with the start of the power supply by turning on the power.

If it is determined in step AKS024 that the reception command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it may be regulated so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS031, control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is completed. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

If it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is completed (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification voice by the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the restrictions may be lifted so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute the power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected due to the start of power supply by turning on the power. good.

FIG. 20-30 shows the priority of control in the present embodiment with respect to notification by effect control, screen display, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031 of the command processing at the time of turning on the power. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the staging control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, setting of the current date / time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 such as the magnet error notification has a lower priority than the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the staging control, the priority is lower than the priority of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. It becomes a degree.

In this way, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, so that the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. If the setting is changed or the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed by step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to a specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even so, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started by switching the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display related to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or output control of the effect such as the setting screen for the power saving function and the like. As a result, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of modification examples related to staging control in other feature parts)
FIG. 20-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed in the modified example in which the setting confirmation process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a staff member of the game hall or the like, and a switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall, and is a display for confirming the setting value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after the effect random number update process is executed in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 20-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting is being confirmed by displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 so that it can be confirmed (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period from the control in step AKS058 to the control in step AKS060. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period from receiving the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. Waiting for customers sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054. It is determined whether or not the demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command is not received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated.

When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and then the setting confirmation notification is started. (Step AKS058). Even if it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification. As a result, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS060).

By executing such an ongoing setting confirmation process, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 29, the effect control board 12 side displays the set value. After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented by preventing the effect being executed from being canceled.

When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the staging control board 12 together with the customer waiting demo designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demo specification command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is sent, and the set value set after the progress of the game is completed. It may be possible to control the state in which it can be confirmed.

Alternatively, the set set value is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to display the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the display monitor 29 displays a display on which the setting value can be confirmed without transmitting a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Control to start may be performed. In this case, the effect control board 12 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120 or the like so that the effect is continuously executed as the game progresses.

In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executed. For example, in the command processing at power-on, the setting change notification ends by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification starts with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period ends. The setting change end notification may be terminated. Further, in the command processing at power-on, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period is completed. The setting confirmation end notification may be terminated.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification voice, or instead of a part or all of the setting change notification, a part or all of the light emitting member of the game effect lamp 9, or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed to cause an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the notification lamp to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or instead of a part or all of the setting confirmation notification, a part of the game effect lamp 9 is replaced with a part or all of the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, control may be performed so that any light emitting member such as all light emitting members or a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification may be performed by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device to notify that the set value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be performed by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device to notify that the set value can be confirmed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

The command 93XXH as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command 9401H are not limited to the prepared form, and the common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be something that can be done. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and the setting confirmation is completed when the setting end command is received in step AKS033. Then, it should be judged.

(Explanation of feature 71AK)
FIG. 20-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the feature portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the upper right portion of the staging control board 12 on which the staging control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in the board case accommodating the staging control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the amount of light emitted from a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when a pachinko / pachislot machine staff member opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 3. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched whether to allow or prohibit the change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

As shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the knob 71AK002 can be turned into a channel by rotating the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of the six stages according to which of the "0" to "F" the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is, and the volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

FIG. 20-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as the effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In this initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set according to "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to "97.0", and the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of any effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. .. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited). Is executed. Further, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the setting screen for the power saving function and the like can be displayed on the staging display device 5, and the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) and. The RTC126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect to any of multiple stages. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

FIG. 20-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification for the feature unit 71AK. In this execution example, as the setting change notification, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIGS. 20-35, the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the feature unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in the step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In this power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the control in step AKS032 starts the setting confirmation notification, and the control in step AKS034 ends the setting confirmation notification. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification is started with the start of the initialization notification period, and the initialization notification is terminated with the end of the initialization notification period. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to the mode of being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are a part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be the mode shown in.

The feature unit 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is set to one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001. Output may be performed at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 to which the message "setting is being changed" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 to which the message "setting is being confirmed" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification voice 71AKE03, which notifies the message "initialized", is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In this way, according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is notified by the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the staging output. .. Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 may be notified by the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. In this way, since the notification is performed by a common output amount, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to the change and confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

FIG. 20-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the feature unit 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the player has not yet adjusted the effect output, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". 20-36 (A) shows the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes an effect image showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "Volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). .. At this time, in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2" and the first on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increase the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a multi-step effect is produced until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed to increase by one step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in multiple stages is increased until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed so as to decrease by one step.

When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of RTC126 can be set. 20-36 (B) shows the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), depending on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the amusement park or the like. Then, the value indicating the current date and time is set (changed) by RTC126. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when it is set to select "power saving mode A" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control to activate the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demo where the demo screen is displayed. Anything that is done will do. Further, when it is set to select "power saving mode B" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is performed during the execution of the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Anything may be used as long as it is controlled to activate the power saving function such as reducing (light emission amount).

FIG. 20-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control main process executed by the staging control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 71AK. It suffices that this staging control main process can be executed in place of the staging control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. It should be. After executing the power-on command process of step 71AKS012, the start output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014), and if it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process. (Step 71AKS017) and the effect random number update process (step 71AKS018) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the ongoing output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

FIG. 20-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the output switching process at the start. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). Then, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. End the switching process. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may control the effect display device 5 to display the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like. After the control for setting the power saving function or the like is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A and the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B. You just have to control it.

When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control is performed to end the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS037), and the output switching process at the start is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of RTC126 is made, the data indicating the changed value is set in RTC126.

FIG. 20-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the in-progress output change process, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the switching permission condition may be satisfied. When such a changeover permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position shown in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match. , It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

When it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, the initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching process at the start may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if it is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control is performed to end the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058).

When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After that, it is determined whether or not the volume and the like can be adjusted by the player based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "0" to "5", the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permission). , It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is not possible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the one that determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected by step 71AKS052 without making the determination by step 71AKS051.

When it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a detection of an operation for changing the output amount of the effect (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. You just have to judge whether it was there or not. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), the control for adjusting the output amount according to the detection result is performed (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process is terminated. In step 71AKS062, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, the update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Just let me do it.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 71AK)
FIG. 20-40 shows the priority of control regarding the notification by the effect control, the screen display, and the like in the modified example of the feature unit 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the setting is controlled to be changed as the power supply is started by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start processing in the power-on command processing step AKS031, and when the setting confirmation state is set, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is used. The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification has a lower priority than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the staging control, the priority of the setting change notification AKP11, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. Is involved in detecting the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting change is completed. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, so that when the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed by the step AKS032 of the command processing at power-on. Saves power based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation is completed. The display of the function setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, while the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed when the setting value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed when the setting value is confirmed. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect while confirming the set value in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered.

By executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start output switching process in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the setting is being changed. Regardless of this, it is not limited to the form of restricting the control of the output amount of the effect so as not to be executed, and whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the command processing at power-on. When the judgment is possible and the operation is detected, the information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. It may be something to do. For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, when it is determined by step AKS027 that the setting change is not completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the specific result of the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After that, in step 71AKS031 of the output switching process at the start, the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the specifying result of the switch position. Also in this case, when the setting is changed, the control of the output amount of the effect can be restricted regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

Alternatively, when the setting is changed, it is determined whether or not the switch position is a specific switch position, for example, whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", and the case is a specific switch position. The control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be prioritized over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the command processing at power-on, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been prioritized, on the effect display device 5 is also terminated. It suffices if the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. May be good. For example, together with or in place of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value changing switch. Based on the above, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated so that the effect output is adjusted according to the switch position and the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not displayed. , Control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the effect is produced regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. Execution of control to switch the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The staging control CPU 120 is provided on the staging control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and receives an operation related to adjusting the output amount of the effect by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, and then the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, in step 71AKS033, control is performed to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037, control is performed to set the power saving function and the like. In this way, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, if there is a detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, the output amount is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

When setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is used regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001. , It is output by the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when notifying with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

(Explanation of means related to feature 71AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 71AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine whose settings related to the effect can be changed, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2015-29614, control when changing the setting of the staging is not considered while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. rice field. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
A staging adjustment detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that can detect an operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the staging.
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 and the ongoing output change process of step 71AKS019). CPU 120 for effect control to be executed, etc.) and
When the change permission state is set, the limiting means for limiting the execution of control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, as a command process at power-on of step 71AKS012, step AKS012 A CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 71AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the execution of an effect according to the progress of the game, and
A staging control board (for example, a staging control board 12) provided with the staging control means is provided.
The effect control board is further provided with a reception unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation that can be detected by the effect adjustment detection means.
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 71AK,
If the operation of the effect adjusting detection means is detected before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means operates after the change permission state ends. It is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature unit 71AK,
It is equipped with an initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine, unlike the operation during the game by the player.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc.). ),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A change notification means (for example, an effect display device 5, a speaker 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of a set value by the setting means is provided.
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of the setting change notification voice 71AKE01) with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means.
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed due to fraudulent activity and to prevent the setting value from being changed.

As a gaming machine of means 6 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The output amount control means is
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13). Priority 71AKP12, etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function). 71AKP11 etc.),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 5 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to check the set value and control the stage of the output amount of the effect, but when changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

(Explanation of feature 72AK)
FIG. 20-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 includes a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After ascending diagonally upward to the right from the retracted position and stopping at an advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. The first to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when they are united and closed. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the center of the display screen of the staging display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is in the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right position.

The second movable member stops with the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at an advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position by the operation motor AK014. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that makes the rotation mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that makes the first to third split pieces of the first movable member movable between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that makes the slide mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operating motor AK014 provides a driving force that makes the second movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial motion is an initial motion that performs the same motion as a normal staging motion during the execution of the staging accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal staging operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the normal staging operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. It is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state to the open state at the origin position by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. After that, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advance position to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as shown by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operating motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retracted position).

When the short initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, the operation may be performed by omitting a part of the long initial operation. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, the control for executing the operations indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operation of the first to third split pieces and the second movable member of the first movable member is performed so that the movement amount is larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the broken line arrow 72AKM03 is used as an operation to move the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the drive of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. Drive the motor AK021. Further, the second movable member may be moved as shown by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIGS. 20-42 show a control pattern used for driving a movable member by the operating motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the staging control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a first effect executed with the progress of a game, such as a reach effect. The effect B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second effect different from the first effect executed as the game progresses, such as a notice effect. .. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The staging control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 20-43 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 72AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, the staging control CPU 120 determines the reception command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control is performed to start the notification (step 72AKS006).

After the control is performed in step 72AKS006, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed, unlike the above embodiment (step 72AKS007). For example, the staging control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change, as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change (step 72AKS008; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of operations. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 72AKS014). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the receive command is a RAM clear notification command, control to execute initialization notification may be performed before control to execute short initial operation is performed by step 72AKS012. ..

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control is performed to start the notification (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 72AKS018; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing is terminated. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. You can control it. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation. It is possible to prevent the control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 72AK)
FIG. 20-44 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in the modified example of the feature portion 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS031), then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to control execution of initialization notification. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. .. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is completed and then the return operation is performed. Following the initial operation, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation. As described above, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in the common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is used. , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS033), and then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the stored contents at the time of the power failure when the power supply is started by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. can. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the state ends, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. As described above, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in the common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is used. , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control to execute the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control to execute the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. It suffices as long as it can be operated according to a predetermined operation mode in the production accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the setting change state that allows the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable member such as the first movable member and the second movable member is placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work of changing the set value is performed. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. In this way, the setting is set by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed when the setting is being changed as the change permission state, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the work of changing the value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS011 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, the control is performed to execute only the long initial operation which is the initial operation. As a result, when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

In the power-on command process in the modified example of the feature unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform a return operation. Controls to execute a long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. It is executed, and when this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation following a short initial operation which is a return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member in order to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable member such as the first movable member and the second movable member is placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting confirmation state is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. This makes it possible to easily check the set value by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed when the setting is in the setting confirmation state, in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered. To do so. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to feature 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 72AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 72AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply.
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, etc. that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change permission state is set.
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means is
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permission state, the control to execute the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permission state and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means controls to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation by the movable member and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature portion 72AK,
CPU 120 for effect control that executes initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 72AKS014) that executes initialization notification when the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply. Etc.)
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying the execution of step 72AKS014).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The movable control means is
In the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017).
After the setting confirmation state is completed, control is performed to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 73AK)
FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 73AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the feature unit 73AK as well, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature unit 72AK of the present embodiment. In the command processing at the time of turning on the power of the feature unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reception command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting change. Control is performed to start the notification (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control by step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed when the setting is changed as the change permission state. ..

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001 (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, the control to execute the short initial operation is controlled. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by step 73AKS010 is completed. By controlling in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation which is the initial operation. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform the control to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state is completed. Alternatively, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is completed, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of operations.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 73AKS012). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, then control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 73AKS004 (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control is performed to start the notification (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the command processing at power-on is terminated. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. You can control it. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in effect. It is possible to prevent the control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK.

FIG. 20-46 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification for the feature unit 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmation in progress" is displayed, and the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the set value may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in the backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set value is stored in a predetermined area by a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122, so that the effect control board 12 can store the set value information together with the RTC information. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the set value history is stored in the backup area in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 together with the RTC information, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a setting value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, power is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. It may be possible to identify it with the start of.

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed and the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of the set value can be grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be moved when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed, so that the setting confirmation notification screen is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff of the amusement park or the like. On the other hand, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so that the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. At this time, control is not performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. In this way, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed while the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed in this setting confirmation state. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the game hall staff can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

Even when controlled by the setting change state, the history of the setting value may be displayable. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. In this way, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply starts, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed so that the set value is executed. It may be something that can easily grasp the history of.

As described above, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control is performed in step 73AKS010 to execute the short initial operation. .. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003, the control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to control the execution of the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is movable when it is prevented that the setting value change work is hindered. The operation of properly returning the member to the origin position becomes possible.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. It is executed, and when this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation following a short initial operation which is a return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member in order to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the reception command is a setting confirmation start command, control is performed in step 73AKS015 to execute a short initial operation. In this way, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is the setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the setting value, is being executed, the control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H, which is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11, is different from the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the setting value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the staging when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 73AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply.
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of controlling a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means is
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 73AK,
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK,
CPU 120 for effect control that executes initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 73AKS012) that executes initialization notification when the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply. Etc.)
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK,
A setting display means (for example, an effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming a setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The setting display means can display a history of setting values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is executed, and does not control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is prevented from being executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped and the work of changing the setting value is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 73AK,
A staging control means (for example, a staging control CPU 120 that executes a command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of a staging based on information from the game control means is provided.
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled (for example, command 9100H which is a setting change start command). ,
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the staging control means and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 74AK)
FIG. 20-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 74AK of this embodiment. The pattern data constituting the staging control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the staging control board 12. The confirmation effect is executably controlled based on the establishment of predetermined confirmation effect conditions after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the feature unit 74AK is the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. It includes confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the initial value 74AKJ00 of the confirmation effect process timer, and for example, the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02 are confirmed. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control the confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are made. By performing control using the staging control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output a confirmation sound and execute confirmation vibration.

Further, during the execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound is started from the right speaker 8R. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is completed, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within the predetermined confirmation acceptance period, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. And the execution is started. One of the effects of the confirmation sound output by the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when any one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the other effect. In this way, by executing the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings, it is easy for the staff of the game hall or the like to grasp whether or not the production using each production device can be normally executed. Can be done.

FIG. 20-48 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control main process executed by the staging control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 74AK. It suffices that this staging control main process can be executed in place of the staging control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then turns on the timer interrupt flag. If it is determined whether or not it is (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step 74AKS014), the command analysis process (step 74AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

FIG. 20-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is performed for the first time, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with the lapse of a predetermined confirmation acceptance time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032, or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that the confirmation acceptance period is (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display is started (step). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display has started (step 74AKS034; Yes), the confirmation acceptance period is controlled to be canceled (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, if the variable display is started during the confirmation acceptance period, the confirmation acceptance period is canceled and the confirmation effect condition is restricted so as not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation acceptance period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap, and the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the action of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the action has been detected to start the confirmation effect. At this time, if there is no operation detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the timer value is determined by the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS060 that the operation has been detected and the setting for executing the confirmation effect is made, the control for ending the confirmation acceptance period may be performed.

If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is in progress. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the variable display has started (step 74AKS041; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to be stopped (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect are controlled so as not to overlap. , The confirmation effect can be executed appropriately.

If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control is performed to end the confirmation effect (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value is matched (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 20-50 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 74AK. In FIG. 20-50 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, it shows the case where it is not controlled by the setting change state. FIG. 20-50 (B) detects an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 20-50 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT01, the staging control board 12 determines that, for example, the staging control CPU 120 has received the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02. .. In the power-on command process of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, it is determined that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. To. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within this confirmation detection period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT04 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

On the other hand, when the setting change state is controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, for example, the staging control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12 on the staging control board 12. Judge that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the control of step AKS026 is performed after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except when the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined in step AKS027 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is completed. , Step AKS030 is controlled, and initialization notification is started.

In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at the timing 74AKT13, the initialization notification at step 74AKS031 in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK. Is determined to be the start of, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT15 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using an arbitrary effect device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. It may be something that can execute.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the step AKS030 controls to execute the initialization notification. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later to perform the confirmation effect. Control to execute. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the power-on command process, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed according to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. conduct. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect period is reached by executing the control in step 74AKS032, and then the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by determining that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036. .. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled by the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation acceptance period will be the same as when the setting confirmation status is completed. Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the control regarding the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the feature unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output confirmation sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation voice by the speakers 8L and 8R which are the sound output means. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

(Explanation of means related to feature 74AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 74AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply.
A staging means capable of performing a staging (for example, a staging display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) and
With a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the power supply is started. Equipped with
The confirmation control means is
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030). ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 74AK,
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030). ),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 74AK,
Equipped with a gaming detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an operation by a player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 74AKS060).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 74AK,
When the confirmation control means is initialized without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, the confirmation control means has the confirmation effect condition in the same confirmation acceptance period as when the change permission state ends. Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS060).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 74AK,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting directing sound,
The confirmation effect includes output of a confirmation voice by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 75AK)
FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 75AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature unit 74AK of the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, the staging control CPU 120 determines the reception command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 75AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting change. Control is performed to start the notification (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control by step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and then the process returns to step 75AKS007. In this way, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008, so that the setting is controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply. At that time, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 to end the setting change (step 75AKS007; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001 (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 75AKS010, the control to execute the initialization notification is controlled. Perform (step 75AKS011), and end the command processing at power-on.

When the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 75AKS003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), after executing the process corresponding to the setting confirmation state as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016). ), Ends command processing when the power is turned on. In this way, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is changed is performed, the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed is not performed when the setting is in the setting confirmation state.

FIG. 20-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control process during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated.

If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). If there is no operation detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting changing confirmation effect control process is terminated. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that an operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read out (step 75AKS034) as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect process timer is initially set. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as the confirmation acceptance period is not provided. Since the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032; Yes), the update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control is performed to end the confirmation effect (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is matched (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

20-53 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 75AK. In FIG. 20-53 (A), there is a detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 when the power supply is started by turning on the power, but there is no detection of an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. Correspondingly, it shows the case where it is not controlled by the setting change state. FIG. 20-53 (B) detects an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 20-53 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the feature unit 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 and the like are started. Is used to sequentially execute a plurality of types of effects, which are the first to third confirmation effects. After that, when the timing is 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT11, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled by the feature unit 74AK. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the command processing at power-on that the received command is the setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in step 75AKS007, but if it does not end at this time, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. To. In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation has been detected. In this way, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B when the setting is changed as the change permission state. For example, if the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. , Control for executing the confirmation effect such as step 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. After that, when the timing is 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15 after the timing is 75AKT14, it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 75AKS007 in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 75AK. As a result, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, as in the case of the feature unit 74AK, so that the confirmation acceptance period is controlled to start. Just do it. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during this confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

As described above, the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK includes the setting changing confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the detection of the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting changing confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that there is, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later, and control is performed to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the confirmation effect when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the work of accurately checking the state of the gaming machine and confirming the state of the gaming machine will be hindered. Can be prevented.

In the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the receive command is a RAM clear notification command, the same confirmation effect control process as that of the feature unit 74AK is executed, so that confirmation is accepted. The period begins. During this confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected without providing the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is changed as the change permission condition. Therefore, in order to prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the set value. Can be done properly.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed according to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period, so that the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine is hindered. When preventing this, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the feature unit 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by determining that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS033. Further, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as the feature unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS060 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Thereby, when it is prevented that the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine is hindered, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

(Explanation of means related to feature section 75AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 75AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 relating to the feature unit 75AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply.
A staging means capable of performing a staging (for example, a staging display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) and
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 and the confirmation effect control during the setting change in step 75AKS008) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Equipped with an effect control CPU 120, etc. that executes processing)
The confirmation control means is
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.). ),
When the change permission state is set, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the gaming machine and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. ..

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 75AK,
The confirmation control means is
When initialization is performed without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033). , Execution of 74AKS038, etc.),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 75AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 75AK,
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, a step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). Execution of 74AKS018, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 75AK,
It is equipped with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an operation by a player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, the execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 100AK)
FIG. 21-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control process process executed by the staging control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 100AK of this embodiment. This staging control process process may be executed in place of the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the above embodiment.

In the effect control process process of the feature unit 100AK, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the setting suggestion effect for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value to the player. The process is executed (step 100AKS101). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the timing suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed to the player before the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the timing suggestion effect, the interest of the game is improved, and the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is improved. Can be planned. If it is determined in the setting suggestion effect start process of step 100AKS101 that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the timing suggestion effect is started. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for executing the setting suggestion effect (step 100AKS102). After that, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S161 to S171 in the same manner as the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the above embodiment.

FIG. 21-2 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 100AKS101 of FIG. 21-1 as the setting suggestion effect start process. In the setting suggestion effect start process shown in FIG. 21-2 (a), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 shown in FIG. 21-2 (b) is different from 0. (Step 100AKS201). As shown in FIG. 21-2 (b), the start determination timer 100AK001 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and measures the duration of the slump state. In the slump state, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure is executed based on the fact that neither the first start condition nor the second start condition is satisfied even though the player is executing the game. It refers to the state in which the progress of the game is stopped.

When it is determined that the value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is 0 (step 100AKS201; No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demo effect is being executed is on. , It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo production is being executed (step 100AKS202). The customer waiting demo flag is set to the ON state when the effect control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11. If it is determined that the customer waiting demo effect is not being executed (step 100AKS202; No), the setting suggestion effect start process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), it is determined whether or not the launch detection flag indicating that the launch of the game ball is detected is on. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the launch of the game ball is detected (step 100AKS203). In this embodiment, a launch detection sensor capable of detecting the launch of a game ball is provided in the hit ball launcher. When the launch of the game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor, a launch detection signal indicating that the launch of the game ball is detected is transmitted from the hit ball launcher to the main board 11. Upon receiving the launch detection signal transmitted from the hit ball launcher, the main board 11 transmits a launch detection command indicating that the launch of the game ball has been detected to the staging control board 12. The firing detection flag is set to the ON state when the effect control board 12 receives the firing detection command transmitted from the main board 11. If it is determined that the launch of the game ball has not been detected (step 100AKS203; No), the setting suggestion effect start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the launch of the game ball is detected (step 100AKS203; Yes), the time measurement by the start determination timer 100AK001 is started (step 100AKS204). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the progress of the game has stopped based on the determination that the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), and the launch of the game ball is detected. If it is determined that the player is executing the game based on the determination (step 100AKS203; Yes), it is determined that the player is in the slump state, and the start determination timer that measures the duration of the slump state is determined. Time measurement by 100AK001 is started.

When it is determined that the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is different from 0 (step 100AKS201; Yes), or after the processing of step 100AKS204 is executed, a predetermined value is determined based on the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. It is determined whether or not the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS205). In this embodiment, the effect start condition is that the duration of the slump state is equal to or longer than the predetermined first reference time (for example, 20 seconds). The duration of the slump state may be acquired as the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. The effect start condition may be such that the number of shot balls in the slump state is a predetermined reference number (for example, 50) or more. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is a launch ball indicating the number of launch balls (the number of times the launched game ball is detected) based on the signal from the discharge port switch 70 for detecting the launched game ball. A number of commands are transmitted to the effect control board 12. When the effect start condition is a condition related to the number of launch balls, the effect control CPU 120 receives the number of launch balls in the slump state from the main board 11 while the time is measured by the start determination timer 100AK001. It may be detected based on the ball count command. The number of launched balls may be detected based on a ball lending signal indicating the number of game balls rented by the ball lending machine supplied from the ball lending machine. In this case, the ball lending signal may be supplied from the ball lending machine to the staging control board 12 via the main board 11, or may be directly supplied from the ball lending machine to the staging control board 12.

When it is determined that the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS205; Yes), settings for executing the setting suggestion effect such as determination of the effect pattern are made (step 100AKS206).

In this embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, three effects of the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are executed step by step. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the timing suggestion effect includes an effect mode that suggests a predetermined first condition, an effect mode that suggests a predetermined second condition, and an effect mode that suggests a predetermined third condition. It is said that it can be executed at. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the timing suggestion effect in various effect modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first stage effect is executed when the first condition is satisfied after the first suggestion effect, which is the timing suggestion effect of the effect mode suggesting the first condition, is executed, and the second stage effect sets the second condition. It is executed when the second condition is satisfied after the second suggestion effect, which is the timing suggestion effect of the suggestion effect mode, is executed, and the third stage effect is the timing suggestion effect of the effect mode suggesting the third condition. It is executed when the third condition is satisfied after the third suggestion effect is executed. The third condition is a condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the second condition (it takes more time to be satisfied), and the second condition is a condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the first condition. In the present embodiment, the first condition is that the number of variable displays of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied becomes a predetermined reference number (for example, 20 times) or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the second condition is that the period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or longer than the predetermined second reference time (for example, 15 minutes). The period according to the second condition elapses only while the game is being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the third condition is that the number of shot balls after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number (for example, 2000). In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect step by step, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, to encourage the player's willingness to continue the game, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be done. The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the one executed in three stages, and an effect having two or less stages may be executed as a setting suggestion effect, or an effect having four or more stages may be executed as a setting suggestion effect. Further, the number of stages of the effect to be executed as the setting suggestion effect may be determined by a random number lottery or the like.

In this embodiment, as the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition, the condition related to the number of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, the condition related to the period, and the number of shot balls, respectively. I explained that the conditions related to and are set, but this is just an example. At least two or more of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, and the first condition, the second condition and the condition may be related to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. At least two or more of the third conditions may be conditions related to the period, and at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition may be conditions related to the number of shot balls. .. That is, all of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions related to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, the first condition is an effect start condition). The number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is 20 times or more after the condition is satisfied, and the second condition is the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied. The number of times of variable display of the figure is 40 times or more, and the third condition is that the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied is 60 times or more. ), All of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition may be the conditions related to the period, and all of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition are the number of shot balls. It may be such a condition. In this embodiment, as one of the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect, it is assumed that the condition (second condition) relating to the period that elapses only while the game is being executed is set. As a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect, a condition related to the elapsed period may be set regardless of whether or not the game is executed. In this case, the elapsed period regardless of whether or not the game is being executed may be acquired based on, for example, the time information output by the real-time clock (RTC) 126.

The effect control CPU 120 executes any of the effects (setting suggestion effects) A to E shown in FIG. 21-3 (a) as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. The effect A is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "Is the setting not bad?" On the image display device 5. The effect B is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "The setting is not bad!" On the image display device 5. The effect C is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "The setting is not bad!" On the image display device 5. The effect D is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "Today is lucky!" On the image display device 5. The effect E is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "It is the best setting!" On the image display device 5. The expectation of the production E is higher than the expectation of the production D, the expectation of the production D is higher than the expectation of the production C, the expectation of the production C is higher than the expectation of the production B, and the expectation of the production B. Is higher than the expectation of production A. The degree of expectation of the effect is the ratio at which the effect is executed when the most advantageous set value 1 is set. That is, the higher the expectation of the effect, the lower the rate at which the effect is executed when the setting value 3 is set to be the most disadvantageous.

In this embodiment, any of the effects A to E shown in FIG. 21-3 (a) will be executed as the setting suggestion effect, but the type of the setting suggestion effect is shown in FIG. 21-3 (a). ) Is not limited to each production. For example, when the set value is composed of 4 or more stages (for example, when the set value is composed of 6 stages of 1 to 6), as the setting suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the set value is even (for example, "even number setting?"). An effect of displaying an image representing the message "" on the image display device 5) may be executed. Alternatively, as the setting suggestion effect, both the effect suggesting that the set value is odd (for example, the effect of displaying an image representing the message "odd number setting?" On the image display device 5) and the most advantageous setting value 1 are the most disadvantageous. An effect suggesting that the setting value 2 is different from the setting value 3 (for example, an effect of displaying an image representing a message "the setting cannot be said" on the image display device 5), to a specific setting value. Execute an effect suggesting that the settings have been made (for example, an effect of displaying an image representing a message such as "setting 1 confirmed!", "Setting 2 confirmed!", "Setting 3 confirmed!" On the image display device 5). You may. Alternatively, as a setting suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the setting value is different from the setting value set yesterday (for example, an image showing a message "maybe the setting is different from yesterday?" Is displayed on the image display device 5). The effect displayed on) may be executed. It should be noted that this effect may be executed when it is determined that the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Alternatively, as a setting suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the set value set yesterday (for example, an image showing a message "maybe a better setting than yesterday?" Is displayed on the image display device 5). The image display device 5 displays an image showing the message "maybe the setting is worse than yesterday?" The effect displayed on) may be executed. In this case, the effect control board 12 is provided with a non-volatile storage device such as a flash memory, and the storage device does not erase the data indicating the set value of yesterday non-volatilely (even if the RAM clear processing is executed). It may be possible to memorize it and execute the production based on this data.

In this embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, the effects A to E for displaying various images shown in FIG. 21-3 (a) on the image display device 5 will be executed. The effect mode is not limited to this, and any setting value set by image display, sound output, lighting of a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operation of an accessory, or a combination thereof can be suggested. Just do it.

In the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of the patterns 1 to X shown in FIG. 21-3 (b) as the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect, so that the first stage effect and the second stage It is determined which of the production A to the production E is to be executed as the production and the third stage production. As shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), in Patterns 1 to 3, any of the effects A to E is set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. In this embodiment, the most promising effect E is executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. In each pattern shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), an effect having a higher expectation than the effect set as the first stage effect is set as the second stage effect, and is set as the second stage effect. A production with a higher degree of expectation than the current production is set as the third stage production. For this reason, as the setting suggestion effect progresses step by step, the expectation of the effect to be executed becomes higher, the interest of the game can be improved, and the player's motivation to continue the game is aroused, and the pachinko machine is used. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine 1.

In Patterns 1 to X shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), although different effects are set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect, the effect of the setting suggestion effect is set. The pattern is not limited to this, and at least two or more of the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect may be the same effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect E having the highest expectation is described as being executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern, but when a pattern other than the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. The effect E may be configured to be executable.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. 21-3 (c) according to the set value set in the process of step 100AKS206. The set setting value may be acquired based on the EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change end command received from the main board 11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (c), the pattern X is determined as an effect pattern only when the most advantageous setting value 1 is set.

In this embodiment, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are collectively determined by executing the process of step 100AKS206 at the start of the setting suggestion effect. However, the method for determining the effect mode is not limited to this, and the effect modes of the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect may be determined, respectively.

After executing the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect to indicate the timing at which the first stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the first condition as the effect suggestion effect. The second suggestion effect suggests the timing when the second stage effect is executed in response to the condition being satisfied, and the timing when the third stage effect is executed in response to the condition being satisfied is suggested. The third suggestion effect is started (step 100AKS207). When the timing suggestion effect is started in the process of step 100AKS207, the timing suggestion effect execution flag indicating that the timing suggestion effect is being executed is set to the ON state. Specifically, as the first suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 is executed as a first suggestion effect by the timing when the first stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the first condition. An effect of displaying an image suggesting the number of times of variable display on the image display device 5 is started. The display of the number of variable displays is updated as the game progresses. As the second suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays on the image display device 5 an image suggesting a period during which the game is executed until the timing when the second stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the second condition. Start the effect to be displayed. The display of this period is updated according to the progress of the game only while the game is being executed. As the third suggestion effect, the effect display control CPU 120 displays on the image display device 5 an image suggesting the number of shot balls until the timing when the third stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the third condition. Start the production.

The first suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the first stage effect is started. The second suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the second stage effect is started. The third suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the third stage effect is started. That is, in the period from the execution of the process of step 100AKS207 to the start of the first stage effect, the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are executed in parallel, and the first stage effect is performed. In the period from the start of the process to the start of the second stage effect, the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are executed in parallel.

As described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions related to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. Correspondingly, at least two or more of the first suggestion effect corresponding to the first condition, the second suggestion effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestion effect corresponding to the third condition are executed. It may be an effect suggesting the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed by the timing. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions related to the period, and correspondingly, the first suggestion corresponding to the first condition. Even if at least two or more of the staging, the second suggestion staging corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestion staging corresponding to the third condition suggest the period until the timing at which the setting suggestion staging is executed. good. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions related to the number of shot balls, and corresponding to this, the first condition corresponding to the first condition. At least two or more of the 1 suggestion effect, the 2nd suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd condition, and the 3rd suggestion effect corresponding to the 3rd condition suggest the number of shot balls until the timing when the setting suggestion effect is executed. May be.

As described above, as a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect, a condition related to the elapsed period may be set regardless of whether or not the game is executed, and the timing suggestion effect may be set accordingly. As a result, the elapsed period may be displayed regardless of whether or not the game is being executed.

In this embodiment, the timing suggestion effect will be described as performing an effect of displaying various images on the image display device 5, but the effect mode of the timing suggestion effect is not limited to this, and the image display and sound are used. It suffices as long as it can suggest the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect by the output of, the lighting of the lamp (for example, the LED of 7 segments), the operation of the accessory, or a combination thereof.

In this embodiment, when the effect start condition is satisfied based on the slump state, the timing suggestion effect is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the slump state, to encourage the player's willingness to continue the game, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, the timing suggestion effect is started when the effect start condition is satisfied based on the slump state, but the effect start condition is not limited to this. For example, when the random number lottery is won after the game is started, it may be determined that the effect start condition is satisfied and the timing suggestion effect may be started. Whether or not the game has started may be determined, for example, by determining whether or not a launch detection command has been received. In this case, after the predetermined timing after the game is started (for example, the timing when the number of launched balls becomes 750 or more), the random number lottery is won at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing. The determination value may be distributed so as to do so. In this case, an image showing the number of fired balls may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Alternatively, when a predetermined timing in the customer waiting state in which the game is not executed (for example, a timing in which 5 minutes or more have passed without receiving the launch detection command after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command) has arrived, the effect is produced. It may be determined that the start condition is satisfied and the timing suggestion effect may be started. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by attracting the attention of the players who have not started the game and motivating them to start the game.

Alternatively, the timing suggestion effect may be started at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. In this case, if the predetermined timing arrives after the reach effect is started, the timing suggestion effect is not executed in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding the timing suggestion effect as the advance notice effect and being confused. Is preferable. Further, even when the predetermined timing arrives after the pseudo-continuous effect is started, it is preferable not to execute the timing suggestion effect in order to avoid the effect from being confused.

After starting the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS207, the effect control CPU 120 starts measuring the time by the suggestion effect timer 100AK002 shown in FIG. 21-2 (b) (step 100AKS208). The suggestion effect timer 100AK002 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and measures the time elapsed since the timing suggestion effect was started. The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of variable displays of the first special figure or the second special figure executed after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS209). The staging control CPU 120 starts measuring the time by the condition determination timer 100AK003 shown in FIG. 21-2 (b) (step 100AKS210). As shown in FIG. 21-2 (b), the condition determination timer 100AK003 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and measures the period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied. The timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 is updated only while the game is being executed. Specifically, the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 may be updated only until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the detection of the fired game ball by the outlet switch 70, for example. .. The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of game balls fired after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS211).

If it is determined in the process of step 100AKS205 that the effect start condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS205; No), whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. (Step 100AKS212). If it is determined that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has not been received (step 100AKS212; No), the setting suggestion effect start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes), the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset (step 100AKS213), and the setting suggestion effect start process is terminated. do. That is, it is determined that the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed based on the determination that the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes). In this case, it is determined that the slump state has ended, and the start determination timer 100AK001 for measuring the duration of the slump state is reset. When the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset in the process of step 100AKS213, the customer waiting demo flag and the launch detection flag are cleared.

FIG. 21-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 100AKS102 of FIG. 21-1 as the setting suggestion effect execution process. In the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 21-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timing suggestion effect execution flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the timing suggestion effect is being executed. Is determined (step 100AKS301). If it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is not being executed (step 100AKS301; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is being executed (step 100AKS301; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first condition establishment flag indicating that the first condition has been satisfied is on. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the first condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS302). When it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS302; No), whether or not the first condition is satisfied (variable of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied). It is determined (whether or not the number of times of display is equal to or greater than the reference number of times) (step 100AKS303). When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied (step 100AKS303; Yes), the effect set as the first stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of step 100AKS206 of the effect A to the effect E is performed. It starts (step 100AKS304) and ends the setting suggestion effect execution process. If it is determined in the process of step 100AKS303 that the first condition is satisfied, the first condition establishment flag is set to the ON state. Further, when the first stage effect is started in the process of step 100AKS304, the first suggestion effect is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS303; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variation display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS305). When it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS305; No), it is determined whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306). In the present embodiment, the end condition is that the customer waiting demo designation command is received after the timing suggestion effect is started, and then the launch detection command is received from the main board 11 without detecting the launch of the game ball. (No) The predetermined third reference time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed. This end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game has not been executed. The end condition is not limited to this, and may be any condition that can determine that the game has not been executed. The elapsed time from receiving the customer waiting demo designation command may be acquired based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002.

If it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS306; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306; Yes), or when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS305; Yes), the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage effect. The first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are terminated (step 100AKS307) without executing the stepwise effect, and the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. When the timing suggestion effect is terminated in the process of step 100AKS307, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag, and the timing suggestion effect execution flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion effect timer 100AK002, and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset. At the same time, the count of the number of variable displays started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of launched balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

If it is determined in the process of step 100AKS302 that the first condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS302; Yes), whether or not the second condition satisfying flag indicating that the second condition has been satisfied is on. By determining, it is determined whether or not the second condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS308). If it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS308; No), whether or not the second condition is satisfied based on the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 (game after the effect start condition is satisfied). It is determined (whether or not the period during which is executed is equal to or longer than the second reference time) (step 100AKS310). The period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied may be acquired as the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003. When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied (step 100AKS310; Yes), the effect set as the second stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of step 100AKS206 of the effect A to the effect E is performed. It starts (step 100AKS309) and ends the setting suggestion effect execution process. If it is determined in the process of step 100AKS310 that the second condition is satisfied (step 100AKS310; Yes), the second condition establishment flag is set to the on state. Further, when the second stage effect is started in the process of step 100AKS309, the second suggestion effect is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS310; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variation display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS311). When it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS311; No), it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS312). If it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS312; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS312; Yes), or when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS311; Yes), the second stage effect and the third stage effect are executed. The second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are terminated (step 100AKS313), and the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. When the timing suggestion effect is terminated in the process of step 100AKS313, the timing suggestion effect is terminated in the process of step 100AKS313, and the first stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS304 is terminated. Further, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion effect execution flag, and the first condition establishment flag are cleared, the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion effect timer 100AK002, and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and in the process of step 100AKS209. The count of the number of times of the variable display started and the count of the number of fired balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

If it is determined in the process of step 100AKS308 that the second condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS308; Yes), whether or not the third condition is satisfied (based on the number of shot balls after the effect start condition is satisfied). (Whether or not the number is equal to or greater than the number) is determined (step 100AKS314). When it is determined that the third condition is satisfied (step 100AKS314; Yes), the effect set as the third stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of step 100AKS206 of the effect A to the effect E (step 100AKS314; Yes). The third stage production) is started (step 100AKS315). The third stage effect started by the process of step 100AKS315 ends after being executed for a predetermined effect time. The execution time of the third stage effect may be acquired based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002. At the end of the third stage effect, the first stage effect started by the process of step 100AKS304 and the second stage effect started by the process of step 100AKS309 are ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the third condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS314; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variation display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS316). When it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS316; No), it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS317). If it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS317; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS317; Yes), when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS316; Yes), or when the third stage effect is started by the process of step 100AKS315. The third suggestion effect is terminated (step 100AKS318), and the setting suggestion effect execution process is terminated. That is, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied in the process of step 100AKS317, or when it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the process of step 100AKS316, the setting suggestion effect execution process is performed without executing the third stage effect. To finish. When the timing suggestion effect is terminated in the process of step 100AKS318, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion effect execution flag, the first condition establishment flag and the second condition establishment flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001 is cleared. , The suggestion effect timer 100AK002 and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and the count of the number of variable displays started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of fired balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the timing suggestion effect is started, it is determined in the process of step 100AKS306, 100AKS312 or 100AKS317 that the end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed. Ends the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not yet been executed among the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are satisfied. The timing suggestion effect is terminated without executing the effect that has not been executed yet. Therefore, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent it from being stolen and maintain the fairness of the game.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at the timing when the elapsed period becomes a predetermined time or more regardless of whether or not the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied, the timing suggestion effect is performed. When the customer waiting demo designation command is received after the start, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect arrives before the end condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

In this embodiment, the end condition is described as being satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, but the end condition may be satisfied based on the operation by the player. For example, after the timing suggestion effect is started, the operating means for accepting (detecting) the operation by the player such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, and the direction indicating key is predetermined by the player. When the operation of is accepted, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, and the timing suggestion effect is ended without executing the effect that has not been executed yet among the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. do. Specifically, when the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detect a pressing operation by the player, a reception screen for accepting the player's selection as to whether or not to end the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and the reception screen is displayed. When the player instructs the end of the setting suggestion effect by using the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35A, or the direction instruction key in the displayed state, it may be determined that the end condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, when the player performs a predetermined operation when the game is completed and the player leaves the seat, the end condition is satisfied and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are still executed. The timing suggestion effect is terminated without executing the effect that has not been performed. Therefore, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent it from being stolen and maintain the fairness of the game. The end condition may be satisfied based on at least one of the fact that the game has not been executed and the operation by the player.

In this embodiment, if it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the processing of steps 100AKS305, 100AKS311 or 100AKS317 after the timing suggestion effect is started, the timing suggestion effect will be terminated. Even if it is determined that a big hit has occurred, the timing suggestion effect may not be ended.

Next, an example of the effect operation in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-5 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect and the timing suggestion effect in this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 21-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the pattern X shown in FIG. 21-3 (b). FIG. 21-5 (A) shows a state in which the demo screen corresponding to the stoppage of the game in the customer waiting state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the customer waiting demo effect is being executed) in the slump state. ing.

When the effect start condition is satisfied (when the duration of the slump state is equal to or longer than the first reference time), as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), as the timing suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are performed. The suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are started. Specifically, as the first suggestion effect, "Small announcement in 20 more games!" Which suggests the number of times the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed. The effect of displaying the first message image AK1 representing the message on the image display device 5 is started. Here, the "small presentation" in the message refers to the execution of the first stage production. Further, as the second suggestion effect, an image of the second message image AK2 representing the message "Announcement in 15:00!", Which suggests the period during which the game is executed until the timing when the second stage effect is executed. The effect of displaying on the display device 5 is started. Here, the "middle announcement" in the message refers to the execution of the second stage production. Further, as the third suggestion effect, the third message image AK3 representing the message "Large announcement with 2000 more launches!", Which suggests the number of shot balls until the timing when the third stage effect is executed, is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect to be displayed is started. After the timing suggestion effect is started, the number of variable displays in the first message image AK1 is displayed, the period during which the game is being executed in the second message image AK2 is displayed, and the launch ball in the third message image AK3. As shown in FIGS. 21-5 (B) to 21-5 (E), the display of the numbers is updated according to the progress of the game. 21-5 (B) and 21-5 (C) show a state in which the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are executed during the same period.

After that, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L of the image display device 5 Variable display of decorative patterns is executed in 5C and 5R.

When the first condition is satisfied (when the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the reference number), it is shown in FIG. 21-5 (D). As shown, the display of the first message image AK1 as the first suggestion effect is finished, and the fourth message image AK4 representing the message "Is the setting not bad?" Is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first stage effect. The effect to be displayed (effect A shown in FIG. 21-3 (a)) is started. FIG. 21-5 (D) shows a state in which the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are executed during the same period.

When the second condition is satisfied (when the period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or longer than the second reference time), the second condition is as shown in FIG. 21-5 (E). The display of the second message image AK2 as a suggestion effect is finished, and the fifth message image AK5 representing the message "The setting is not bad!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second stage effect (FIG. 21). -3 Start the effect B) shown in (a). FIG. 21-5 (E) shows a state in which the first stage effect and the second stage effect are executed during the same period.

When the third condition is satisfied (when the number of shot balls after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the reference number), as shown in FIG. 21-5 (F), the third suggestive effect is the third. 3 The display of the message image AK3 is finished, and as the third stage effect, the sixth message image AK6 representing the message "It is the best setting!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 21-3 (a)). The effect X) shown in is executed. FIG. 21-5 (F) shows a state in which the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are executed during the same period. After the third stage effect is executed for a predetermined effect time, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (G), the display of the fourth message image AK4 as the first stage effect and the fifth message as the second stage effect. The setting suggestion effect ends when both the display of the image AK5 and the display of the sixth message image AK6 as the third stage effect are terminated.

It should be noted that an effect other than the timing suggestion effect may be executed as an effect suggesting the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, as an effect that suggests the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed, even if an explanatory effect that explains (suggests) the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed to the player is executed. good. Specifically, at the end of the special figure game in which the display result is a "big hit", an effect of displaying a character image suggesting a set value on the image display device 5 is executed as a setting suggestion effect, and an explanatory effect is performed. As an effect, the effect of explaining to the player that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is the end of the special figure game in which the display result is "big hit" (for example, "Attention to the character image displayed at the end of the big hit!" The effect of displaying an image representing the message on the image display device 5) may be executed. The explanatory effect may be executed at an arbitrary timing before the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of means related to feature 100AK)
With regard to the above feature unit 100AK, conventionally, the setting values of multiple stages are changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to the value corresponding to the changed setting value, and the giraffe and the elephant are set according to the setting values before and after the change. , A gaming machine that suggests setting values before and after the change by displaying a character image of any of the lions, for example, is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It is desired to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 pertaining to the feature unit 100AK for providing a gaming machine with improved entertainment interests,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
Specific effect executing means (for example, step 100AKS304, 100AKS309, 100AKS315, etc.) for executing a specific effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value, and an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process.
A special effect executing means (for example, step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, timing suggestion effect, explanatory effect, etc.) that suggests the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means before the specific effect is executed. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
To prepare
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enable the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 100AK,
The special effect executing means can execute the special effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an effect mode suggesting a first condition and an effect mode suggesting a second condition). And the production mode that suggests the third condition),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 100AK characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect in various effect modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 100AK,
As the special effect, the special effect executing means executes an effect that suggests a period until the timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as a second suggestion effect, a second stage effect is performed. Start a production that suggests the period until the timing of execution),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or 2 according to the feature unit 100AK characterized by the above.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enable the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature unit 100AK,
As the special effect, the special effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the number of variable displays executed by the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as the first suggestive effect). , Start an effect that suggests the number of variable displays to be executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3 according to the feature unit 100AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enable the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

As a gaming machine of means 5 related to the feature unit 100AK,
After the predetermined timing after the game is started, the special effect executing means executes the special effect at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing (for example, the predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the ratio determined to execute the timing suggestion effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the feature unit 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 6 related to the feature unit 100AK,
The special effect executing means can execute at least the first special effect suggesting the first condition and the second special effect suggesting the second condition as the special effect (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). , The first suggestion effect suggesting the first condition, the second suggestion effect suggesting the second condition, and the third suggestion effect suggesting the third condition are started),.
The specific effect executing means is
After the first special effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed in response to the condition that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the process of step 100AKS304 is executed).
After the second special effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed in response to the condition that the second condition is satisfied (for example, the process of step 100AKS309 is executed).
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestive effect is executed during the period when the first suggestive effect is executed).
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5 according to the feature unit 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect step by step, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 7 related to the feature unit 100AK,
The special effect executing means starts the special effect in response to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, an effect start condition) in a state where the variable display is not executed (for example, the effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). When it is determined that is satisfied, the process of step 100AKS207 is executed),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 according to the feature unit 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 8 related to the feature unit 100AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an end condition) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, the end condition). For example, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied in the process of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, 100AKS317, the process of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, 100AKS318 is executed).
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 according to the feature unit 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player sets a value by a specific effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of the game and maintain the fairness of the game.

As a gaming machine of means 9 related to the feature unit 100AK,
Further equipped with operating means for accepting operations by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, direction indicating key, etc.).
When the player accepts a predetermined operation by the operation means after the special effect is started, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestion effect is started). , Stick controller 31A, push button 31B, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, direction instruction key, etc., when the player accepts a predetermined operation, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not been executed yet),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8 according to the feature unit 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player sets a value by a specific effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of the game and maintain the fairness of the game.

(Explanation of means related to feature section 101AK)
Regarding the feature unit 101AK, conventionally, the setting value of multiple stages is changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to the value corresponding to the changed setting value, and the giraffe, elephant, and lion are set according to the setting value before and after the change. As a gaming machine that suggests setting values before and after the change by displaying any one of the character images, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It is desired to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 101AK for providing a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value.
Specific effect executing means (for example, step 100AKS304, 100AKS309, 100AKS315, etc.) for executing a specific effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value, and an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process.
A special effect executing means (for example, step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, timing suggestion effect, explanatory effect, etc.) that suggests the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means before the specific effect is executed. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
The special effect executing means can execute the special effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an effect mode suggesting a first condition, and an effect mode suggesting a second condition). And the production mode that suggests the third condition),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, and the special effect is executed in various effect modes to improve the interest of the game. , It is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 101AK,
As the special effect, the special effect executing means executes an effect that suggests a period until the timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as a second suggestion effect, a second stage effect is performed. Start a production that suggests the period until the timing of execution),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 101AK characterized by the above.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enable the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 101AK,
As the special effect, the special effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the number of variable displays executed by the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as the first suggestive effect). , Start an effect that suggests the number of variable displays to be executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or 2 according to the feature unit 101AK characterized by the above.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enable the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 101AK,
After the predetermined timing after the game is started, the special effect executing means executes the special effect at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing (for example, the predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the ratio determined to execute the timing suggestion effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3 according to the feature unit 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 101AK,
The special effect executing means can execute at least the first special effect suggesting the first condition and the second special effect suggesting the second condition as the special effect (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). , The first suggestion effect suggesting the first condition, the second suggestion effect suggesting the second condition, and the third suggestion effect suggesting the third condition are started),.
The specific effect executing means is
After the first special effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed in response to the condition that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the process of step 100AKS304 is executed).
After the second special effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed in response to the condition that the second condition is satisfied (for example, the process of step 100AKS309 is executed).
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestive effect is executed during the period when the first suggestive effect is executed).
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the feature unit 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect step by step, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 6 according to the feature unit 101AK,
The special effect executing means starts the special effect in response to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, an effect start condition) in a state where the variable display is not executed (for example, the effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). When it is determined that is satisfied, the process of step 100AKS207 is executed),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5 according to the feature unit 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

As a gaming machine of means 7 related to the feature unit 101AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an end condition) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, the end condition). For example, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied in the process of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, 100AKS317, the process of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, 100AKS318 is executed).
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 according to the feature unit 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player sets a value by a specific effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of the game and maintain the fairness of the game.

As a gaming machine of means 8 according to the feature unit 101AK,
Further equipped with operating means for accepting operations by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, direction indicating key, etc.).
When the player accepts a predetermined operation by the operation means after the special effect is started, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestion effect is started). , Stick controller 31A, push button 31B, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, direction instruction key, etc., when the player accepts a predetermined operation, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not been executed yet),
It may be a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 according to the feature unit 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, another player sets a value by a specific effect executed based on the game performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of the game and maintain the fairness of the game.

(Explanation of means common to feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK)
As a gaming machine of means A according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51) that can detect the operation related to the setting,
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine, and
A setting confirmation control means that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of an operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002).
A change permission control means that can control the change permission state based on the detection of an operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply is provided (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13).
The gaming machine may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state to appropriately set the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means B according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51) that can detect the operation related to the setting,
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to initialization,
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection means and the operation is detected by the initialization detection means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the start of the power supply, while the power supply is started. For effect control that executes the initialization notification means (for example, the command processing at power-on of step AKS012) that executes the initialization notification after the operation is not detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection means. CPU120, etc.)
The gaming machine may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification is appropriately executed, and the set value can be appropriately set.

As a gaming machine of means C according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area is provided.
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
The gaming machine may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a gaming machine of means D according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
A staging detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the staging, and
It is provided with display control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing step AKS026) that displays the display related to the set value by the setting means with priority over the display related to the output amount of the effect.
The gaming machine may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means E related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
A staging control means that controls the execution of the staging based on information from the game control means (for example, a staging control CPU 120 that executes a command analysis process of the AKS015) and the staging control means.
The staging control means is an information limiting means (for example, a staging control CPU 120 for executing AKS027) that restricts control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when the change permission state is in effect. ) And
The gaming machine may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions. For example, regarding the feature unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and for the feature unit 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the command process at power-on. For effect control that does not control to execute the short initial operation until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is completed for the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that controls the execution and the feature unit 73AK. Confirmation of the configuration of the CPU 120 and the feature section 74AK in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process The setting of the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect control process and the feature section 75AK is being changed in step 75AKS008 of the command processing at power-on. Regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation effect control process, the feature units 100AK and 101AK, the setting suggestion effect start process is executed in step 100AKS101 of the effect control process process, and the setting suggestion effect execution process is executed in step 100AKS102. The configuration to be performed may be a combination of a part or all thereof as appropriate.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 51 ... Lock switch 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
AK001 ... Clear switch 71AK001 ... Output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 ... Short initial control pattern 72AKP02 ... Long initial control pattern 74AKP01 ... Directional control pattern

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of variable display of the specific identification information so that the player can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.
Game control means and
Production control means and
Display means and
Equipped with sound output means,
The game control means is
When the game medium enters the starting area, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed, and the specific identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the determination, any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state and a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine the fluctuation pattern of
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, the first command is transmitted to the staging control means.
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, the second command is transmitted to the staging control means.
The staging control means
The variable display of the decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed by using the display means.
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the special reach is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the special reach is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the special reach is executed when the first command is received, the display means displays the title display corresponding to the special reach, suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, and a plurality of. A specific control is executed to display a first expectation suggestion element composed of, and a second expectation suggestion element composed of a plurality of frames corresponding to the first expectation suggestion element. ,
When the special reach is executed when the second command is received, the display means is made to display the title display corresponding to the special reach, and the specific control is executed.
The specific control is
After displaying the second expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality, the display of the first expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality is started one by one, and the first expectation composed of the plurality is started. It is a control that displays the degree suggestion elements one by one in the corresponding second expectation suggestion element and highlights the first expectation suggestion element displayed in the second expectation suggestion element.
Among the second expectation suggestion elements composed of the plurality of pieces, the control does not highlight the second expectation suggestion element in which the first expectation suggestion element is not displayed in the frame.
The first expectation suggestion element composed of the plurality is larger than the size of the second expectation suggestion element of 1 among the already displayed second expectation suggestion elements composed of the plurality. After being displayed in, the gaming machine is reduced to the size of the first second expectation suggestion element and displayed in the corresponding second expectation suggestion element .

Images